<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Judith+Friedrich</id>
	<title>TARGET 3001! PCB Design Freeware is a Layout CAD Software|Support, Tutorials, Shop - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Judith+Friedrich"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php/Special:Contributions/Judith_Friedrich"/>
	<updated>2026-04-10T03:36:28Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.42.1</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29365</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29365"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T15:47:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: /* Elements of the Text dialog */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; Windows fonts can be mirrored only with the Windows NT4/2000/XP 32-bit graphics. Windows 95/98/ME with its 16-bit graphics can&#039;t do this. The TARGET 3001! Gerber driver is not able to output Windows fonts. They are replaced by the font TARGET. Always check the result of this replacement please!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;- width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the &#039;&#039;&#039;font size in pt (points)&#039;&#039;&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;stroke width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (&#039;&#039;&#039;Alignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Mirrored&#039;&#039;&#039;). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Fixed”&#039;&#039;&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-aligned&#039;&#039;&#039;shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Italic&#039;&#039;&#039; makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Aura&#039;&#039;&#039; represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the &#039;&#039;&#039;“Minimum Width”&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Function”&#039;&#039;&#039; text can be “Normal Text&amp;quot;, meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component value&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Symbol name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pin name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output scale&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Project name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;File name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Special property&#039;&#039;&#039; for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant&#039;&#039;&#039; for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component type&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Revision&#039;&#039;&#039; for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal Pages&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component Usage&#039;&#039;&#039; For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version&#039;&#039;&#039; For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039; For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Highest Page Number&#039;&#039;&#039; For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_TextOptDlg.jpg|left]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
(special characters, characters, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click directly to access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the “Content” field of the text dialog. You can also double-click [[M11]] on a character at the bottom of the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also insert links to the Internet (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into text, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., “Z:\directory\file.xyz,” as well as file paths in UNC format: “\\server\directory\file.xyz,” or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: “.&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de” .The user is then asked whether they want to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with ‘’&#039;V34&#039;‘’, TARGET can scale all dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger size. This makes them easier to use, and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29364</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29364"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T15:47:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: /* Elements of the Text dialog */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; Windows fonts can be mirrored only with the Windows NT4/2000/XP 32-bit graphics. Windows 95/98/ME with its 16-bit graphics can&#039;t do this. The TARGET 3001! Gerber driver is not able to output Windows fonts. They are replaced by the font TARGET. Always check the result of this replacement please!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;- width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the &#039;&#039;&#039;font size in pt (points)&#039;&#039;&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;stroke width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (&#039;&#039;&#039;Alignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Mirrored&#039;&#039;&#039;). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Fixed”&#039;&#039;&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-aligned&#039;&#039;&#039;shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Italic&#039;&#039;&#039; makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Aura&#039;&#039;&#039; represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the &#039;&#039;&#039;“Minimum Width”&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Function”&#039;&#039;&#039; text can be “Normal Text&amp;quot;, meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component value&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Symbol name&#039;‘’ for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pin name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output scale&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Project name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;File name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Special property&#039;&#039;&#039; for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant&#039;&#039;&#039; for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component type&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Revision&#039;&#039;&#039; for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal Pages&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component Usage&#039;&#039;&#039; For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version&#039;&#039;&#039; For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039; For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Highest Page Number&#039;&#039;&#039; For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_TextOptDlg.jpg|left]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
(special characters, characters, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click directly to access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the “Content” field of the text dialog. You can also double-click [[M11]] on a character at the bottom of the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also insert links to the Internet (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into text, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., “Z:\directory\file.xyz,” as well as file paths in UNC format: “\\server\directory\file.xyz,” or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: “.&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de” .The user is then asked whether they want to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with ‘’&#039;V34&#039;‘’, TARGET can scale all dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger size. This makes them easier to use, and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29363</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29363"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T15:39:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: /* Elements of the Text dialog */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; Windows fonts can be mirrored only with the Windows NT4/2000/XP 32-bit graphics. Windows 95/98/ME with its 16-bit graphics can&#039;t do this. The TARGET 3001! Gerber driver is not able to output Windows fonts. They are replaced by the font TARGET. Always check the result of this replacement please!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;- width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the &#039;&#039;&#039;font size in pt (points)&#039;&#039;&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;stroke width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (&#039;&#039;&#039;Alignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Mirrored&#039;&#039;&#039;). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Fixed”&#039;&#039;&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-aligned&#039;&#039;&#039;shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Italic&#039;&#039;&#039; makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Aura&#039;&#039;&#039; represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the &#039;&#039;&#039;“Minimum Width”&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Function”&#039;&#039;&#039; text can be “Normal Text&amp;quot;, meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component value&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Symbol name&#039;‘’ for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039; &#039;‘&#039;Signal name’&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Pin name&#039;‘’ for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification date&#039;‘’ for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification time&#039;‘’ for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output date&#039;‘’ for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output time&#039;‘’ for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output scale&#039;‘’ for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Project name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;File name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page number&#039;‘’ for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Special property&#039;‘’ for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant&#039;‘’ for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component type&#039;‘’ for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page name&#039;‘’ for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Number&#039;‘’ for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Revision&#039;‘’ for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Signal Pages&#039;‘’ for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Component Usage’‘’ For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Version’‘’ For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Comment’‘’ For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Highest Page Number’‘’ For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_TextOptDlg.jpg|left]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
(special characters, characters, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click directly to access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the “Content” field of the text dialog. You can also double-click [[M11]] on a character at the bottom of the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also insert links to the Internet (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into text, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., “Z:\directory\file.xyz,” as well as file paths in UNC format: “\\server\directory\file.xyz,” or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: “.&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de” .The user is then asked whether they want to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with ‘’&#039;V34&#039;‘’, TARGET can scale all dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger size. This makes them easier to use, and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29362</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29362"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T14:36:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: /* Elements of the Text dialog */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; Windows fonts can be mirrored only with the Windows NT4/2000/XP 32-bit graphics. Windows 95/98/ME with its 16-bit graphics can&#039;t do this. The TARGET 3001! Gerber driver is not able to output Windows fonts. They are replaced by the font TARGET. Always check the result of this replacement please!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;- width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the ‘’&#039;font size in pt (points)‘’&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’‘“stroke width”’‘’ is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (‘’‘Alignment’‘’ and ‘’‘Mirrored’‘’). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’&#039;“Fixed”‘’&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; ‘‘‘Right-aligned’’’ shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and ‘’‘Italic’‘’ makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Page’’’ determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘‘&#039;Layer’’&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Aura’‘’ represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the ‘’&#039;“Minimum Width”‘’&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘’&#039;“Function”‘’&#039; text can be “Normal Text,” meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component name&#039;‘’ for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component value&#039;‘’ (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Symbol name&#039;‘’ for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039; &#039;‘&#039;Signal name’&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Pin name&#039;‘’ for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification date&#039;‘’ for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification time&#039;‘’ for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output date&#039;‘’ for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output time&#039;‘’ for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output scale&#039;‘’ for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Project name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;File name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page number&#039;‘’ for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Special property&#039;‘’ for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant&#039;‘’ for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component type&#039;‘’ for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page name&#039;‘’ for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Number&#039;‘’ for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Revision&#039;‘’ for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Signal Pages&#039;‘’ for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Component Usage’‘’ For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Version’‘’ For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Comment’‘’ For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Highest Page Number’‘’ For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_TextOptDlg.jpg|left]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
(special characters, characters, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click directly to access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the “Content” field of the text dialog. You can also double-click [[M11]] on a character at the bottom of the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also insert links to the Internet (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into text, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., “Z:\directory\file.xyz,” as well as file paths in UNC format: “\\server\directory\file.xyz,” or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: “.&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de” .The user is then asked whether they want to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with ‘’&#039;V34&#039;‘’, TARGET can scale all dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger size. This makes them easier to use, and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29361</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29361"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T14:34:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: /* Elements of the Text dialog */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; Windows fonts can be mirrored only with the Windows NT4/2000/XP 32-bit graphics. Windows 95/98/ME with its 16-bit graphics can&#039;t do this. The TARGET 3001! Gerber driver is not able to output Windows fonts. They are replaced by the font TARGET. Always check the result of this replacement please!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows ‘borrows’ from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’&#039;“Font height”‘’&#039; and ‘’&#039;“-width”‘’&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the ‘’&#039;font size in pt (points)‘’&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’‘“stroke width”’‘’ is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (‘’‘Alignment’‘’ and ‘’‘Mirrored’‘’). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’&#039;“Fixed”‘’&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; ‘‘‘Right-aligned’’’ shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and ‘’‘Italic’‘’ makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Page’’’ determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘‘&#039;Layer’’&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Aura’‘’ represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the ‘’&#039;“Minimum Width”‘’&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘’&#039;“Function”‘’&#039; text can be “Normal Text,” meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component name&#039;‘’ for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component value&#039;‘’ (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Symbol name&#039;‘’ for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039; &#039;‘&#039;Signal name’&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Pin name&#039;‘’ for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification date&#039;‘’ for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification time&#039;‘’ for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output date&#039;‘’ for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output time&#039;‘’ for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output scale&#039;‘’ for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Project name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;File name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page number&#039;‘’ for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Special property&#039;‘’ for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant&#039;‘’ for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component type&#039;‘’ for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page name&#039;‘’ for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Number&#039;‘’ for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Revision&#039;‘’ for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Signal Pages&#039;‘’ for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Component Usage’‘’ For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Version’‘’ For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Comment’‘’ For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Highest Page Number’‘’ For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_TextOptDlg.jpg|left]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
(special characters, characters, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click directly to access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the “Content” field of the text dialog. You can also double-click [[M11]] on a character at the bottom of the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also insert links to the Internet (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into text, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., “Z:\directory\file.xyz,” as well as file paths in UNC format: “\\server\directory\file.xyz,” or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: “.&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de” .The user is then asked whether they want to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with ‘’&#039;V34&#039;‘’, TARGET can scale all dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger size. This makes them easier to use, and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29360</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29360"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T14:31:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: /* Elements of the Text dialog */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; Windows fonts can be mirrored only with the Windows NT4/2000/XP 32-bit graphics. Windows 95/98/ME with its 16-bit graphics can&#039;t do this. The TARGET 3001! Gerber driver is not able to output Windows fonts. They are replaced by the font TARGET. Always check the result of this replacement please!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a ‘’&#039;font&#039;‘’. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows ‘borrows’ from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’&#039;“Font height”‘’&#039; and ‘’&#039;“-width”‘’&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the ‘’&#039;font size in pt (points)‘’&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’‘“stroke width”’‘’ is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (‘’‘Alignment’‘’ and ‘’‘Mirrored’‘’). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’&#039;“Fixed”‘’&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; ‘‘‘Right-aligned’’’ shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and ‘’‘Italic’‘’ makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Page’’’ determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘‘&#039;Layer’’&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Aura’‘’ represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the ‘’&#039;“Minimum Width”‘’&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘’&#039;“Function”‘’&#039; text can be “Normal Text,” meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component name&#039;‘’ for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component value&#039;‘’ (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Symbol name&#039;‘’ for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039; &#039;‘&#039;Signal name’&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Pin name&#039;‘’ for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification date&#039;‘’ for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification time&#039;‘’ for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output date&#039;‘’ for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output time&#039;‘’ for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output scale&#039;‘’ for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Project name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;File name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page number&#039;‘’ for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Special property&#039;‘’ for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant&#039;‘’ for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component type&#039;‘’ for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page name&#039;‘’ for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Number&#039;‘’ for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Revision&#039;‘’ for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Signal Pages&#039;‘’ for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Component Usage’‘’ For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Version’‘’ For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Comment’‘’ For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Highest Page Number’‘’ For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_TextOptDlg.jpg|left]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
(special characters, characters, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click directly to access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the “Content” field of the text dialog. You can also double-click [[M11]] on a character at the bottom of the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also insert links to the Internet (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into text, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., “Z:\directory\file.xyz,” as well as file paths in UNC format: “\\server\directory\file.xyz,” or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: “.&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de” .The user is then asked whether they want to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with ‘’&#039;V34&#039;‘’, TARGET can scale all dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger size. This makes them easier to use, and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29359</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29359"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T14:29:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: /* Elements of the Text dialog */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; Windows fonts can be mirrored only with the Windows NT4/2000/XP 32-bit graphics. Windows 95/98/ME with its 16-bit graphics can&#039;t do this. The TARGET 3001! Gerber driver is not able to output Windows fonts. They are replaced by the font TARGET. Always check the result of this replacement please!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’‘[A]‘’’ and ‘’‘[a]‘’’ buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The ‘’‘[A✓]‘’’ button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a ‘’&#039;font&#039;‘’. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows ‘borrows’ from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’&#039;“Font height”‘’&#039; and ‘’&#039;“-width”‘’&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the ‘’&#039;font size in pt (points)‘’&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’‘“stroke width”’‘’ is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (‘’‘Alignment’‘’ and ‘’‘Mirrored’‘’). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’&#039;“Fixed”‘’&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; ‘‘‘Right-aligned’’’ shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and ‘’‘Italic’‘’ makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Page’’’ determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘‘&#039;Layer’’&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Aura’‘’ represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the ‘’&#039;“Minimum Width”‘’&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘’&#039;“Function”‘’&#039; text can be “Normal Text,” meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component name&#039;‘’ for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component value&#039;‘’ (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Symbol name&#039;‘’ for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039; &#039;‘&#039;Signal name’&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Pin name&#039;‘’ for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification date&#039;‘’ for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification time&#039;‘’ for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output date&#039;‘’ for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output time&#039;‘’ for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output scale&#039;‘’ for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Project name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;File name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page number&#039;‘’ for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Special property&#039;‘’ for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant&#039;‘’ for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component type&#039;‘’ for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page name&#039;‘’ for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Number&#039;‘’ for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Revision&#039;‘’ for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Signal Pages&#039;‘’ for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Component Usage’‘’ For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Version’‘’ For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Comment’‘’ For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Highest Page Number’‘’ For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_TextOptDlg.jpg|left]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
(special characters, characters, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click directly to access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the “Content” field of the text dialog. You can also double-click [[M11]] on a character at the bottom of the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also insert links to the Internet (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into text, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., “Z:\directory\file.xyz,” as well as file paths in UNC format: “\\server\directory\file.xyz,” or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: “.&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de” .The user is then asked whether they want to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with ‘’&#039;V34&#039;‘’, TARGET can scale all dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger size. This makes them easier to use, and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29358</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29358"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T14:28:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: /* Elements of the Text dialog */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; Windows fonts can be mirrored only with the Windows NT4/2000/XP 32-bit graphics. Windows 95/98/ME with its 16-bit graphics can&#039;t do this. The TARGET 3001! Gerber driver is not able to output Windows fonts. They are replaced by the font TARGET. Always check the result of this replacement please!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;Content&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’‘[A]‘’’ and ‘’‘[a]‘’’ buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The ‘’‘[A✓]‘’’ button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a ‘’&#039;font&#039;‘’. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows ‘borrows’ from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’&#039;“Font height”‘’&#039; and ‘’&#039;“-width”‘’&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the ‘’&#039;font size in pt (points)‘’&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’‘“stroke width”’‘’ is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (‘’‘Alignment’‘’ and ‘’‘Mirrored’‘’). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’&#039;“Fixed”‘’&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; ‘‘‘Right-aligned’’’ shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and ‘’‘Italic’‘’ makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Page’’’ determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘‘&#039;Layer’’&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Aura’‘’ represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the ‘’&#039;“Minimum Width”‘’&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘’&#039;“Function”‘’&#039; text can be “Normal Text,” meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component name&#039;‘’ for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component value&#039;‘’ (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Symbol name&#039;‘’ for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039; &#039;‘&#039;Signal name’&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Pin name&#039;‘’ for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification date&#039;‘’ for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification time&#039;‘’ for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output date&#039;‘’ for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output time&#039;‘’ for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output scale&#039;‘’ for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Project name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;File name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page number&#039;‘’ for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Special property&#039;‘’ for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant&#039;‘’ for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component type&#039;‘’ for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page name&#039;‘’ for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Number&#039;‘’ for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Revision&#039;‘’ for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Signal Pages&#039;‘’ for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Component Usage’‘’ For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Version’‘’ For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Comment’‘’ For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Highest Page Number’‘’ For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_TextOptDlg.jpg|left]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
(special characters, characters, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click directly to access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the “Content” field of the text dialog. You can also double-click [[M11]] on a character at the bottom of the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also insert links to the Internet (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into text, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., “Z:\directory\file.xyz,” as well as file paths in UNC format: “\\server\directory\file.xyz,” or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: “.&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de” .The user is then asked whether they want to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with ‘’&#039;V34&#039;‘’, TARGET can scale all dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger size. This makes them easier to use, and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29357</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29357"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T14:27:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: /* Elements of the Text dialog */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; Windows fonts can be mirrored only with the Windows NT4/2000/XP 32-bit graphics. Windows 95/98/ME with its 16-bit graphics can&#039;t do this. The TARGET 3001! Gerber driver is not able to output Windows fonts. They are replaced by the font TARGET. Always check the result of this replacement please!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Position&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;Content&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’‘[A]‘’’ and ‘’‘[a]‘’’ buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The ‘’‘[A✓]‘’’ button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a ‘’&#039;font&#039;‘’. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows ‘borrows’ from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’&#039;“Font height”‘’&#039; and ‘’&#039;“-width”‘’&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the ‘’&#039;font size in pt (points)‘’&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’‘“stroke width”’‘’ is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (‘’‘Alignment’‘’ and ‘’‘Mirrored’‘’). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’&#039;“Fixed”‘’&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; ‘‘‘Right-aligned’’’ shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and ‘’‘Italic’‘’ makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Page’’’ determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘‘&#039;Layer’’&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Aura’‘’ represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the ‘’&#039;“Minimum Width”‘’&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘’&#039;“Function”‘’&#039; text can be “Normal Text,” meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component name&#039;‘’ for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component value&#039;‘’ (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Symbol name&#039;‘’ for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039; &#039;‘&#039;Signal name’&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Pin name&#039;‘’ for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification date&#039;‘’ for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification time&#039;‘’ for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output date&#039;‘’ for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output time&#039;‘’ for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output scale&#039;‘’ for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Project name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;File name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page number&#039;‘’ for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Special property&#039;‘’ for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant&#039;‘’ for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component type&#039;‘’ for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page name&#039;‘’ for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Number&#039;‘’ for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Revision&#039;‘’ for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Signal Pages&#039;‘’ for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Component Usage’‘’ For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Version’‘’ For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Comment’‘’ For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Highest Page Number’‘’ For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_TextOptDlg.jpg|left]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
(special characters, characters, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click directly to access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the “Content” field of the text dialog. You can also double-click [[M11]] on a character at the bottom of the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also insert links to the Internet (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into text, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., “Z:\directory\file.xyz,” as well as file paths in UNC format: “\\server\directory\file.xyz,” or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: “.&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de” .The user is then asked whether they want to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with ‘’&#039;V34&#039;‘’, TARGET can scale all dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger size. This makes them easier to use, and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29356</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29356"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T14:27:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: /* Elements of the Text dialog */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; Windows fonts can be mirrored only with the Windows NT4/2000/XP 32-bit graphics. Windows 95/98/ME with its 16-bit graphics can&#039;t do this. The TARGET 3001! Gerber driver is not able to output Windows fonts. They are replaced by the font TARGET. Always check the result of this replacement please!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Position&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;Content&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’‘[A]‘’’ and ‘’‘[a]‘’’ buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The ‘’‘[A✓]‘’’ button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a ‘’&#039;font&#039;‘’. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows ‘borrows’ from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’&#039;“Font height”‘’&#039; and ‘’&#039;“-width”‘’&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the ‘’&#039;font size in pt (points)‘’&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’‘“stroke width”’‘’ is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (‘’‘Alignment’‘’ and ‘’‘Mirrored’‘’). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’&#039;“Fixed”‘’&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; ‘‘‘Right-aligned’’’ shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and ‘’‘Italic’‘’ makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Page’’’ determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘‘&#039;Layer’’&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Aura’‘’ represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the ‘’&#039;“Minimum Width”‘’&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘’&#039;“Function”‘’&#039; text can be “Normal Text,” meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component name&#039;‘’ for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component value&#039;‘’ (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Symbol name&#039;‘’ for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039; &#039;‘&#039;Signal name’&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Pin name&#039;‘’ for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification date&#039;‘’ for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification time&#039;‘’ for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output date&#039;‘’ for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output time&#039;‘’ for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output scale&#039;‘’ for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Project name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;File name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page number&#039;‘’ for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Special property&#039;‘’ for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant&#039;‘’ for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component type&#039;‘’ for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page name&#039;‘’ for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Number&#039;‘’ for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Revision&#039;‘’ for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Signal Pages&#039;‘’ for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Component Usage’‘’ For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Version’‘’ For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Comment’‘’ For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Highest Page Number’‘’ For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_TextOptDlg.jpg|left]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
(special characters, characters, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click directly to access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the “Content” field of the text dialog. You can also double-click [[M11]] on a character at the bottom of the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also insert links to the Internet (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into text, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., “Z:\directory\file.xyz,” as well as file paths in UNC format: “\\server\directory\file.xyz,” or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: “.&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de” .The user is then asked whether they want to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with ‘’&#039;V34&#039;‘’, TARGET can scale all dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger size. This makes them easier to use, and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29355</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29355"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T14:20:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: /* Elements of the Text dialog */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; Windows fonts can be mirrored only with the Windows NT4/2000/XP 32-bit graphics. Windows 95/98/ME with its 16-bit graphics can&#039;t do this. The TARGET 3001! Gerber driver is not able to output Windows fonts. They are replaced by the font TARGET. Always check the result of this replacement please!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Position&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the &#039;“bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
Under ‘’&#039;“Content”‘’&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘’&#039;[multiline]‘’&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The ‘’&#039;[Windows]‘’&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The ‘’&#039;[Unicode]‘’&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’‘[A]‘’’ and ‘’‘[a]‘’’ buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The ‘’‘[A✓]‘’’ button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a ‘’&#039;font&#039;‘’. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows ‘borrows’ from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’&#039;“Font height”‘’&#039; and ‘’&#039;“-width”‘’&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the ‘’&#039;font size in pt (points)‘’&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’‘“stroke width”’‘’ is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (‘’‘Alignment’‘’ and ‘’‘Mirrored’‘’). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’&#039;“Fixed”‘’&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; ‘‘‘Right-aligned’’’ shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and ‘’‘Italic’‘’ makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Page’’’ determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘‘&#039;Layer’’&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Aura’‘’ represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the ‘’&#039;“Minimum Width”‘’&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘’&#039;“Function”‘’&#039; text can be “Normal Text,” meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component name&#039;‘’ for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component value&#039;‘’ (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Symbol name&#039;‘’ for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039; &#039;‘&#039;Signal name’&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Pin name&#039;‘’ for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification date&#039;‘’ for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification time&#039;‘’ for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output date&#039;‘’ for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output time&#039;‘’ for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output scale&#039;‘’ for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Project name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;File name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page number&#039;‘’ for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Special property&#039;‘’ for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant&#039;‘’ for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component type&#039;‘’ for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page name&#039;‘’ for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Number&#039;‘’ for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Revision&#039;‘’ for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Signal Pages&#039;‘’ for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Component Usage’‘’ For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Version’‘’ For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Comment’‘’ For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Highest Page Number’‘’ For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_TextOptDlg.jpg|left]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
(special characters, characters, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click directly to access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the “Content” field of the text dialog. You can also double-click [[M11]] on a character at the bottom of the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also insert links to the Internet (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into text, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., “Z:\directory\file.xyz,” as well as file paths in UNC format: “\\server\directory\file.xyz,” or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: “.&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de” .The user is then asked whether they want to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with ‘’&#039;V34&#039;‘’, TARGET can scale all dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger size. This makes them easier to use, and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29353</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29353"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T14:18:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: /* Elements of the Text dialog */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; Windows fonts can be mirrored only with the Windows NT4/2000/XP 32-bit graphics. Windows 95/98/ME with its 16-bit graphics can&#039;t do this. The TARGET 3001! Gerber driver is not able to output Windows fonts. They are replaced by the font TARGET. Always check the result of this replacement please!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;quot; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
Under ‘’&#039;“Content”‘’&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘’&#039;[multiline]‘’&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The ‘’&#039;[Windows]‘’&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The ‘’&#039;[Unicode]‘’&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’‘[A]‘’’ and ‘’‘[a]‘’’ buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The ‘’‘[A✓]‘’’ button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a ‘’&#039;font&#039;‘’. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows ‘borrows’ from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’&#039;“Font height”‘’&#039; and ‘’&#039;“-width”‘’&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the ‘’&#039;font size in pt (points)‘’&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’‘“stroke width”’‘’ is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (‘’‘Alignment’‘’ and ‘’‘Mirrored’‘’). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’&#039;“Fixed”‘’&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; ‘‘‘Right-aligned’’’ shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and ‘’‘Italic’‘’ makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Page’’’ determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘‘&#039;Layer’’&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Aura’‘’ represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the ‘’&#039;“Minimum Width”‘’&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘’&#039;“Function”‘’&#039; text can be “Normal Text,” meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component name&#039;‘’ for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component value&#039;‘’ (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Symbol name&#039;‘’ for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039; &#039;‘&#039;Signal name’&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Pin name&#039;‘’ for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification date&#039;‘’ for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification time&#039;‘’ for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output date&#039;‘’ for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output time&#039;‘’ for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output scale&#039;‘’ for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Project name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;File name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page number&#039;‘’ for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Special property&#039;‘’ for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant&#039;‘’ for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component type&#039;‘’ for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page name&#039;‘’ for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Number&#039;‘’ for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Revision&#039;‘’ for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Signal Pages&#039;‘’ for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Component Usage’‘’ For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Version’‘’ For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Comment’‘’ For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Highest Page Number’‘’ For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_TextOptDlg.jpg|left]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
(special characters, characters, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click directly to access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the “Content” field of the text dialog. You can also double-click [[M11]] on a character at the bottom of the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also insert links to the Internet (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into text, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., “Z:\directory\file.xyz,” as well as file paths in UNC format: “\\server\directory\file.xyz,” or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: “.&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de” .The user is then asked whether they want to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with ‘’&#039;V34&#039;‘’, TARGET can scale all dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger size. This makes them easier to use, and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_component_from_PDF&amp;diff=29352</id>
		<title>Create component from PDF</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_component_from_PDF&amp;diff=29352"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T14:11:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use AI to generate components directly from PDF datasheets. All you need to do is download a comprehensive datasheet and provide it to TARGET. The datasheet is sent to an external AI for analysis. TARGET then generates a component symbol from the datasheet and suggests a (hopefully) available package for it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the schematic menu under “Components / Special Functions,” click on “Convert PDF Datasheet to Component (External AI).” After a brief explanation, select the PDF file (usually in the Windows “Downloads” folder) and make it available to TARGET. You should not upload confidential PDFs or PDFs with private content here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Especially if the component information in the PDF is stored as images rather than text, the analysis can take a very long time (OCR, AI Thinking Model). If you don’t want to wait that long, you can cancel the process and, for example, start again after fifteen minutes with the same PDF file. The AI has remembered the generated response for this PDF and returns the result immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp1.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Image 1: Wait until e.g. &amp;quot;vs1053.pdf&amp;quot; was processed by AI)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This component symbol was generated by TARGET from:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp2.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Image 2: Final symbol, ready for review and modification)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you like the component icon, you can now export it as a user-defined component:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp3.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Image 3: Export the entire component using the [x] key)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You’ll also need to select the component type (here, “Other Audio” for an audio codec), enter the name (here, “VS1053b”), select the manufacturer (here, “VLSI”), and choose the correct package “LQFP48” (the AI had added a hyphen to “LQFP-48”), copy a function from the PDF if necessary, and finally select the prefix “IC.” Clicking the [Save Component] button completes the process, and the IC is ready for use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tool is particularly suitable for components with many pins and standard packages. It can save a lot of manual work. However, it does not generate packages itself, e.g., for an SMD USB connector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Créer composant à partir d&#039;un PDF]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Bauteil aus PDF erzeugen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_component_from_PDF&amp;diff=29343</id>
		<title>Create component from PDF</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_component_from_PDF&amp;diff=29343"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T13:53:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also access “T-3001” without TARGET [https://office.ibfriedrich.com/chatBot/T-3001.html here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use AI to generate components directly from PDF datasheets. All you need to do is download a suitable datasheet and make it available to TARGET. The datasheet is sent to an external AI for analysis. TARGET then generates a component symbol from the datasheet and suggests a (hopefully) available package for it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the schematic menu under “Components / Special Functions,” click on “Convert PDF Datasheet to Component (External AI).” After a brief explanation, select the PDF file (usually in the Windows “Downloads” folder) and make it available to TARGET. You should not upload confidential PDFs or PDFs with private content here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Especially if the component information in the PDF is stored as images rather than text, the analysis can take a very long time (OCR, AI Thinking Model). If you don’t want to wait that long, you can cancel the process and, for example, start again after fifteen minutes with the same PDF file. The AI has remembered the generated response for this PDF and returns the result immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp1.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Image 1: Wait until, for example, “vs1053.pdf” has been processed by the AI)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This component symbol was generated by TARGET from it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp2.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Image 2: Finished symbol, ready for review and modifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tool is particularly well-suited for components with many connections and standard packages. It can save a lot of paperwork in such cases. However, it does not generate the packages themselves—for example, for an SMD USB connector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Créer composant à partir d&#039;un PDF]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Bauteil aus PDF erzeugen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_component_from_PDF&amp;diff=29342</id>
		<title>Create component from PDF</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_component_from_PDF&amp;diff=29342"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T13:51:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also access “T-3001” without TARGET [https://office.ibfriedrich.com/chatBot/T-3001.html here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use AI to generate components directly from PDF datasheets. All you need to do is download a suitable datasheet and make it available to TARGET. The datasheet is sent to an external AI for analysis. TARGET then generates a component symbol from the datasheet and suggests a (hopefully) available package for it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the schematic menu under “Components / Special Functions,” click on “Convert PDF Datasheet to Component (External AI).” After a brief explanation, select the PDF file (usually in the Windows “Downloads” folder) and make it available to TARGET. You should not upload confidential PDFs or PDFs with private content here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Especially if the component information in the PDF is stored as images rather than text, the analysis can take a very long time (OCR, AI Thinking Model). If you don’t want to wait that long, you can cancel the process and, for example, start again after fifteen minutes with the same PDF file. The AI has remembered the generated response for this PDF and returns the result immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp1.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Image 1: Wait until, for example, “vs1053.pdf” has been processed by the AI)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This component symbol was generated by TARGET from it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp2.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Image 2: Finished symbol, ready for review and modifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dieses Tool eignet sich vor allem für Bauteile mit vielen Anschlüssen und mit Standard-Gehäusen. Dann kann es viel Schreibarbeit sparen. Gehäuse selbst, z.B. für einen SMD-USB-Stecker werden davon nicht erzeugt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Créer composant à partir d&#039;un PDF]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Bauteil aus PDF erzeugen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_component_from_PDF&amp;diff=29341</id>
		<title>Create component from PDF</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_component_from_PDF&amp;diff=29341"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T13:49:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also access “T-3001” without TARGET [https://office.ibfriedrich.com/chatBot/T-3001.html here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use AI to generate components directly from PDF datasheets. All you need to do is download a suitable datasheet and make it available to TARGET. The datasheet is sent to an external AI for analysis. TARGET then generates a component symbol from the datasheet and suggests a (hopefully) available package for it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the schematic menu under “Components / Special Functions,” click on “Convert PDF Datasheet to Component (External AI).” After a brief explanation, select the PDF file (usually in the Windows “Downloads” folder) and make it available to TARGET. You should not upload confidential PDFs or PDFs with private content here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Especially if the component information in the PDF is stored as images rather than text, the analysis can take a very long time (OCR, AI Thinking Model). If you don’t want to wait that long, you can cancel the process and, for example, start again after fifteen minutes with the same PDF file. The AI has remembered the generated response for this PDF and returns the result immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp1.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Image 1: Wait until, for example, “vs1053.pdf” has been processed by the AI)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This component symbol was generated by TARGET from it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp2.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Image 2: Finished symbol, ready for review and&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dieses Tool eignet sich vor allem für Bauteile mit vielen Anschlüssen und mit Standard-Gehäusen. Dann kann es viel Schreibarbeit sparen. Gehäuse selbst, z.B. für einen SMD-USB-Stecker werden davon nicht erzeugt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Créer composant à partir d&#039;un PDF]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Bauteil aus PDF erzeugen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=AI_Assistant_%22T-3001%22&amp;diff=29340</id>
		<title>AI Assistant &quot;T-3001&quot;</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=AI_Assistant_%22T-3001%22&amp;diff=29340"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T13:44:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version V34, the AI assistant named “T-3001” is available in the bottom-right corner of the TARGET interface as a chatbot to answer your questions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:KI-AssistentT-3001.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Image 1: Ki-Assistent &amp;quot;T-3001&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use “T-3001” without TARGET [https://office.ibfriedrich.com/chatBot/T-3001.html here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please enter your questions about using TARGET 3001! The more specific your question is, the higher the chance of getting a useful answer. If you notice that “T-3001” doesn’t understand your question correctly or gives an unhelpful answer, simply enter your email address in the input field below and press [Return]. The chat history will then be forwarded directly to the TARGET team and promptly answered by a human via email as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The AI assistant “T-3001” is still in training and may provide incorrect or even dangerous answers. Users must always first verify the plausibility of every answer! The questions and answers are processed by an external artificial intelligence (AI) system. The questions and answers are stored on our servers for one week.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, do not include any private or confidential information in your inquiries. Please report any incorrect or inappropriate responses to us via [mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com email].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Assistant IA &amp;quot;T-3001&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:KI-Assistent &amp;quot;T-3001&amp;quot;]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Screen_resolution_-_Pixels_-_Scaling_-_Blurry&amp;diff=29339</id>
		<title>Screen resolution - Pixels - Scaling - Blurry</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Screen_resolution_-_Pixels_-_Scaling_-_Blurry&amp;diff=29339"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T13:40:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with ‘’&#039;V34&#039;‘’, TARGET can scale all dialogs automatically. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with very high resolution), TARGET will automatically enlarge its interface and dialogs. This makes them easy to use, and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Scaling.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
(Figure 1: Windows scaling, here 125%)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If the screen resolution of TARGET is too high or too low, or if text elements appear too large, too small, or blurry/washed out, it may be helpful to find the settings that Windows uses for TARGET:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:High dpi.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Résolution d&#039;écran - Pixels - Mise à l&#039;échelle - Affichage flou]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Auflösung - Bildschirmauflösung - Resolution - Pixel - Skalierung]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29338</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29338"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T13:36:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: /* Font blurred, image unsharp */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; Windows fonts can be mirrored only with the Windows NT4/2000/XP 32-bit graphics. Windows 95/98/ME with its 16-bit graphics can&#039;t do this. The TARGET 3001! Gerber driver is not able to output Windows fonts. They are replaced by the font TARGET. Always check the result of this replacement please!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use ‘’&#039;“Position”‘’&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under ‘’&#039;“Content”‘’&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘’&#039;[multiline]‘’&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The ‘’&#039;[Windows]‘’&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The ‘’&#039;[Unicode]‘’&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’‘[A]‘’’ and ‘’‘[a]‘’’ buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The ‘’‘[A✓]‘’’ button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a ‘’&#039;font&#039;‘’. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows ‘borrows’ from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’&#039;“Font height”‘’&#039; and ‘’&#039;“-width”‘’&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the ‘’&#039;font size in pt (points)‘’&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’‘“stroke width”’‘’ is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (‘’‘Alignment’‘’ and ‘’‘Mirrored’‘’). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’&#039;“Fixed”‘’&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; ‘‘‘Right-aligned’’’ shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and ‘’‘Italic’‘’ makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Page’’’ determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘‘&#039;Layer’’&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Aura’‘’ represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the ‘’&#039;“Minimum Width”‘’&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘’&#039;“Function”‘’&#039; text can be “Normal Text,” meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component name&#039;‘’ for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component value&#039;‘’ (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Symbol name&#039;‘’ for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039; &#039;‘&#039;Signal name’&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Pin name&#039;‘’ for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification date&#039;‘’ for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification time&#039;‘’ for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output date&#039;‘’ for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output time&#039;‘’ for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output scale&#039;‘’ for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Project name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;File name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page number&#039;‘’ for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Special property&#039;‘’ for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant&#039;‘’ for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component type&#039;‘’ for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page name&#039;‘’ for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Number&#039;‘’ for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Revision&#039;‘’ for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Signal Pages&#039;‘’ for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Component Usage’‘’ For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Version’‘’ For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Comment’‘’ For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Highest Page Number’‘’ For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_TextOptDlg.jpg|left]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
(special characters, characters, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click directly to access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the “Content” field of the text dialog. You can also double-click [[M11]] on a character at the bottom of the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also insert links to the Internet (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into text, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., “Z:\directory\file.xyz,” as well as file paths in UNC format: “\\server\directory\file.xyz,” or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: “.&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de” .The user is then asked whether they want to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with ‘’&#039;V34&#039;‘’, TARGET can scale all dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger size. This makes them easier to use, and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29335</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29335"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T13:33:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: /* Internet links and links to files */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; Windows fonts can be mirrored only with the Windows NT4/2000/XP 32-bit graphics. Windows 95/98/ME with its 16-bit graphics can&#039;t do this. The TARGET 3001! Gerber driver is not able to output Windows fonts. They are replaced by the font TARGET. Always check the result of this replacement please!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use ‘’&#039;“Position”‘’&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under ‘’&#039;“Content”‘’&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘’&#039;[multiline]‘’&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The ‘’&#039;[Windows]‘’&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The ‘’&#039;[Unicode]‘’&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’‘[A]‘’’ and ‘’‘[a]‘’’ buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The ‘’‘[A✓]‘’’ button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a ‘’&#039;font&#039;‘’. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows ‘borrows’ from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’&#039;“Font height”‘’&#039; and ‘’&#039;“-width”‘’&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the ‘’&#039;font size in pt (points)‘’&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’‘“stroke width”’‘’ is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (‘’‘Alignment’‘’ and ‘’‘Mirrored’‘’). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’&#039;“Fixed”‘’&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; ‘‘‘Right-aligned’’’ shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and ‘’‘Italic’‘’ makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Page’’’ determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘‘&#039;Layer’’&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Aura’‘’ represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the ‘’&#039;“Minimum Width”‘’&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘’&#039;“Function”‘’&#039; text can be “Normal Text,” meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component name&#039;‘’ for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component value&#039;‘’ (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Symbol name&#039;‘’ for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039; &#039;‘&#039;Signal name’&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Pin name&#039;‘’ for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification date&#039;‘’ for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification time&#039;‘’ for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output date&#039;‘’ for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output time&#039;‘’ for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output scale&#039;‘’ for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Project name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;File name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page number&#039;‘’ for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Special property&#039;‘’ for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant&#039;‘’ for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component type&#039;‘’ for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page name&#039;‘’ for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Number&#039;‘’ for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Revision&#039;‘’ for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Signal Pages&#039;‘’ for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Component Usage’‘’ For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Version’‘’ For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Comment’‘’ For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Highest Page Number’‘’ For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_TextOptDlg.jpg|left]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
(special characters, characters, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click directly to access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the “Content” field of the text dialog. You can also double-click [[M11]] on a character at the bottom of the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also insert links to the Internet (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into text, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., “Z:\directory\file.xyz,” as well as file paths in UNC format: “\\server\directory\file.xyz,” or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: “.&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de” .The user is then asked whether they want to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ab der &#039;&#039;&#039;V34&#039;&#039;&#039; kann TARGET alle Dialoge skalieren. Wird in den Windows-Anzeigeneinstellungen eine Skalierung vorgenommen (z.B. für einen Monitor mit sehr hoher Auflösung), dann zeigt TARGET seine Oberfläche und die Dialoge von alleine vergrößert an. Die sind dann bequem zu bedienen und die Anzeige der eigentlichen Schaltung bleibt gestochen scharf.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bis V33 kann dieser Tipp hier helfen: Setzen Sie ggf einen Haken in den Eigenschaften der TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Have a look at the properties of the TarVxx.exe - check the box &amp;quot;Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29334</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29334"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T13:29:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: /* Internet links and links to files */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; Windows fonts can be mirrored only with the Windows NT4/2000/XP 32-bit graphics. Windows 95/98/ME with its 16-bit graphics can&#039;t do this. The TARGET 3001! Gerber driver is not able to output Windows fonts. They are replaced by the font TARGET. Always check the result of this replacement please!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use ‘’&#039;“Position”‘’&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under ‘’&#039;“Content”‘’&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘’&#039;[multiline]‘’&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The ‘’&#039;[Windows]‘’&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The ‘’&#039;[Unicode]‘’&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’‘[A]‘’’ and ‘’‘[a]‘’’ buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The ‘’‘[A✓]‘’’ button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a ‘’&#039;font&#039;‘’. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows ‘borrows’ from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’&#039;“Font height”‘’&#039; and ‘’&#039;“-width”‘’&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the ‘’&#039;font size in pt (points)‘’&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’‘“stroke width”’‘’ is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (‘’‘Alignment’‘’ and ‘’‘Mirrored’‘’). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’&#039;“Fixed”‘’&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; ‘‘‘Right-aligned’’’ shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and ‘’‘Italic’‘’ makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Page’’’ determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘‘&#039;Layer’’&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Aura’‘’ represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the ‘’&#039;“Minimum Width”‘’&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘’&#039;“Function”‘’&#039; text can be “Normal Text,” meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component name&#039;‘’ for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component value&#039;‘’ (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Symbol name&#039;‘’ for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039; &#039;‘&#039;Signal name’&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Pin name&#039;‘’ for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification date&#039;‘’ for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification time&#039;‘’ for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output date&#039;‘’ for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output time&#039;‘’ for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output scale&#039;‘’ for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Project name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;File name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page number&#039;‘’ for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Special property&#039;‘’ for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant&#039;‘’ for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component type&#039;‘’ for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page name&#039;‘’ for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Number&#039;‘’ for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Revision&#039;‘’ for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Signal Pages&#039;‘’ for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Component Usage’‘’ For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Version’‘’ For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Comment’‘’ For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Highest Page Number’‘’ For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_TextOptDlg.jpg|left]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
(special characters, characters, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click directly to access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the “Content” field of the text dialog. You can also double-click [[M11]] on a character at the bottom of the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also insert links to the Internet (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into text, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Sie in ein Textelement einen Link einfügen, dann kann man später auf den Text doppelklicken ([[M11]]) und TARGET ruft die entsprechende Ressource über Windows auf. Wenn Sie einen solchen Text ändern wollen, selektieren Sie ihn bitte und tippen Sie die Taste [ä] zum Ändern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Möglich sind Dateipfade mit Laufwerksbuchstaben, z.B. &amp;quot;Z:\Verzeichnis\Datei.xyz&amp;quot; oder Dateipfade im UNC-Format: &amp;quot;\\server\verzeichnis\Datei.xyz&amp;quot; oder URLs für Internet-Aufrufe mit HTTP oder HTTPS: &amp;quot;&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de&amp;quot;. Der User wird dann noch gefragt, ob er den Link-Aufruf ausführen will. Ebenso wird darauf hingewiesen, dass es gefährlich sein kann in Schaltungen unbekannter Herkunft Links auszuführen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ein URL-Link wird an Windows weitergeleitet, welches dann den Standard-Internet-Browser öffnet und den Link anzeigt. Bei Links auf lokale Dateien wird die mit dem Dateityp verbundene Anwendung gestartet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ab der &#039;&#039;&#039;V34&#039;&#039;&#039; kann TARGET alle Dialoge skalieren. Wird in den Windows-Anzeigeneinstellungen eine Skalierung vorgenommen (z.B. für einen Monitor mit sehr hoher Auflösung), dann zeigt TARGET seine Oberfläche und die Dialoge von alleine vergrößert an. Die sind dann bequem zu bedienen und die Anzeige der eigentlichen Schaltung bleibt gestochen scharf.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bis V33 kann dieser Tipp hier helfen: Setzen Sie ggf einen Haken in den Eigenschaften der TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Have a look at the properties of the TarVxx.exe - check the box &amp;quot;Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29333</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29333"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T13:28:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: /* Internet links and links to files */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; Windows fonts can be mirrored only with the Windows NT4/2000/XP 32-bit graphics. Windows 95/98/ME with its 16-bit graphics can&#039;t do this. The TARGET 3001! Gerber driver is not able to output Windows fonts. They are replaced by the font TARGET. Always check the result of this replacement please!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use ‘’&#039;“Position”‘’&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under ‘’&#039;“Content”‘’&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘’&#039;[multiline]‘’&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The ‘’&#039;[Windows]‘’&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The ‘’&#039;[Unicode]‘’&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’‘[A]‘’’ and ‘’‘[a]‘’’ buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The ‘’‘[A✓]‘’’ button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a ‘’&#039;font&#039;‘’. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows ‘borrows’ from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’&#039;“Font height”‘’&#039; and ‘’&#039;“-width”‘’&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the ‘’&#039;font size in pt (points)‘’&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’‘“stroke width”’‘’ is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (‘’‘Alignment’‘’ and ‘’‘Mirrored’‘’). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’&#039;“Fixed”‘’&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; ‘‘‘Right-aligned’’’ shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and ‘’‘Italic’‘’ makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Page’’’ determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘‘&#039;Layer’’&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Aura’‘’ represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the ‘’&#039;“Minimum Width”‘’&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘’&#039;“Function”‘’&#039; text can be “Normal Text,” meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component name&#039;‘’ for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component value&#039;‘’ (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Symbol name&#039;‘’ for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039; &#039;‘&#039;Signal name’&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Pin name&#039;‘’ for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification date&#039;‘’ for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification time&#039;‘’ for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output date&#039;‘’ for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output time&#039;‘’ for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output scale&#039;‘’ for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Project name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;File name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page number&#039;‘’ for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Special property&#039;‘’ for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant&#039;‘’ for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component type&#039;‘’ for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page name&#039;‘’ for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Number&#039;‘’ for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Revision&#039;‘’ for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Signal Pages&#039;‘’ for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Component Usage’‘’ For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Version’‘’ For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Comment’‘’ For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Highest Page Number’‘’ For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_TextOptDlg.jpg|left]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
(special characters, characters, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click directly to access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the “Content” field of the text dialog. You can also double-click [[M11]] on a character at the bottom of the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also insert links to the Internet (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into text, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Sie in ein Textelement einen Link einfügen, dann kann man später auf den Text doppelklicken ([[M11]]) und TARGET ruft die entsprechende Ressource über Windows auf. Wenn Sie einen solchen Text ändern wollen, selektieren Sie ihn bitte und tippen Sie die Taste [ä] zum Ändern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Möglich sind Dateipfade mit Laufwerksbuchstaben, z.B. &amp;quot;Z:\Verzeichnis\Datei.xyz&amp;quot; oder Dateipfade im UNC-Format: &amp;quot;\\server\verzeichnis\Datei.xyz&amp;quot; oder URLs für Internet-Aufrufe mit HTTP oder HTTPS: &amp;quot;&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de&amp;quot;. Der User wird dann noch gefragt, ob er den Link-Aufruf ausführen will. Ebenso wird darauf hingewiesen, dass es gefährlich sein kann in Schaltungen unbekannter Herkunft Links auszuführen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ein URL-Link wird an Windows weitergeleitet, welches dann den Standard-Internet-Browser öffnet und den Link anzeigt. Bei Links auf lokale Dateien wird die mit dem Dateityp verbundene Anwendung gestartet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ab der &#039;&#039;&#039;V34&#039;&#039;&#039; kann TARGET alle Dialoge skalieren. Wird in den Windows-Anzeigeneinstellungen eine Skalierung vorgenommen (z.B. für einen Monitor mit sehr hoher Auflösung), dann zeigt TARGET seine Oberfläche und die Dialoge von alleine vergrößert an. Die sind dann bequem zu bedienen und die Anzeige der eigentlichen Schaltung bleibt gestochen scharf.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bis V33 kann dieser Tipp hier helfen: Setzen Sie ggf einen Haken in den Eigenschaften der TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Have a look at the properties of the TarVxx.exe - check the box &amp;quot;Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29332</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29332"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T13:27:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: /* Unicode special chars and foreign languages */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; Windows fonts can be mirrored only with the Windows NT4/2000/XP 32-bit graphics. Windows 95/98/ME with its 16-bit graphics can&#039;t do this. The TARGET 3001! Gerber driver is not able to output Windows fonts. They are replaced by the font TARGET. Always check the result of this replacement please!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use ‘’&#039;“Position”‘’&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under ‘’&#039;“Content”‘’&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘’&#039;[multiline]‘’&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The ‘’&#039;[Windows]‘’&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The ‘’&#039;[Unicode]‘’&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’‘[A]‘’’ and ‘’‘[a]‘’’ buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The ‘’‘[A✓]‘’’ button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a ‘’&#039;font&#039;‘’. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows ‘borrows’ from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’&#039;“Font height”‘’&#039; and ‘’&#039;“-width”‘’&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the ‘’&#039;font size in pt (points)‘’&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’‘“stroke width”’‘’ is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (‘’‘Alignment’‘’ and ‘’‘Mirrored’‘’). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’&#039;“Fixed”‘’&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; ‘‘‘Right-aligned’’’ shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and ‘’‘Italic’‘’ makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Page’’’ determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘‘&#039;Layer’’&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Aura’‘’ represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the ‘’&#039;“Minimum Width”‘’&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘’&#039;“Function”‘’&#039; text can be “Normal Text,” meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component name&#039;‘’ for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component value&#039;‘’ (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Symbol name&#039;‘’ for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039; &#039;‘&#039;Signal name’&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Pin name&#039;‘’ for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification date&#039;‘’ for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification time&#039;‘’ for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output date&#039;‘’ for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output time&#039;‘’ for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output scale&#039;‘’ for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Project name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;File name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page number&#039;‘’ for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Special property&#039;‘’ for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant&#039;‘’ for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component type&#039;‘’ for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page name&#039;‘’ for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Number&#039;‘’ for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Revision&#039;‘’ for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Signal Pages&#039;‘’ for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Component Usage’‘’ For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Version’‘’ For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Comment’‘’ For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Highest Page Number’‘’ For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_TextOptDlg.jpg|left]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
(special characters, characters, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click directly to access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the “Content” field of the text dialog. You can also double-click [[M11]] on a character at the bottom of the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ab der V34 können Sie auch Links ins Internet (URLs) oder Links zu lokalen Dateien im Intranet in Texte einfügen, die dann vom User durch Doppelklick geöffnet werden können:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links zu URLs oder zu Dateien&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Sie in ein Textelement einen Link einfügen, dann kann man später auf den Text doppelklicken ([[M11]]) und TARGET ruft die entsprechende Ressource über Windows auf. Wenn Sie einen solchen Text ändern wollen, selektieren Sie ihn bitte und tippen Sie die Taste [ä] zum Ändern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Möglich sind Dateipfade mit Laufwerksbuchstaben, z.B. &amp;quot;Z:\Verzeichnis\Datei.xyz&amp;quot; oder Dateipfade im UNC-Format: &amp;quot;\\server\verzeichnis\Datei.xyz&amp;quot; oder URLs für Internet-Aufrufe mit HTTP oder HTTPS: &amp;quot;&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de&amp;quot;. Der User wird dann noch gefragt, ob er den Link-Aufruf ausführen will. Ebenso wird darauf hingewiesen, dass es gefährlich sein kann in Schaltungen unbekannter Herkunft Links auszuführen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ein URL-Link wird an Windows weitergeleitet, welches dann den Standard-Internet-Browser öffnet und den Link anzeigt. Bei Links auf lokale Dateien wird die mit dem Dateityp verbundene Anwendung gestartet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ab der &#039;&#039;&#039;V34&#039;&#039;&#039; kann TARGET alle Dialoge skalieren. Wird in den Windows-Anzeigeneinstellungen eine Skalierung vorgenommen (z.B. für einen Monitor mit sehr hoher Auflösung), dann zeigt TARGET seine Oberfläche und die Dialoge von alleine vergrößert an. Die sind dann bequem zu bedienen und die Anzeige der eigentlichen Schaltung bleibt gestochen scharf.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bis V33 kann dieser Tipp hier helfen: Setzen Sie ggf einen Haken in den Eigenschaften der TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Have a look at the properties of the TarVxx.exe - check the box &amp;quot;Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29331</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29331"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T13:25:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: /* Unicode special chars and foreign languages */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; Windows fonts can be mirrored only with the Windows NT4/2000/XP 32-bit graphics. Windows 95/98/ME with its 16-bit graphics can&#039;t do this. The TARGET 3001! Gerber driver is not able to output Windows fonts. They are replaced by the font TARGET. Always check the result of this replacement please!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use ‘’&#039;“Position”‘’&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under ‘’&#039;“Content”‘’&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘’&#039;[multiline]‘’&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The ‘’&#039;[Windows]‘’&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The ‘’&#039;[Unicode]‘’&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’‘[A]‘’’ and ‘’‘[a]‘’’ buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The ‘’‘[A✓]‘’’ button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a ‘’&#039;font&#039;‘’. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows ‘borrows’ from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’&#039;“Font height”‘’&#039; and ‘’&#039;“-width”‘’&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the ‘’&#039;font size in pt (points)‘’&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’‘“stroke width”’‘’ is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (‘’‘Alignment’‘’ and ‘’‘Mirrored’‘’). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’&#039;“Fixed”‘’&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; ‘‘‘Right-aligned’’’ shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and ‘’‘Italic’‘’ makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Page’’’ determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘‘&#039;Layer’’&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Aura’‘’ represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the ‘’&#039;“Minimum Width”‘’&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘’&#039;“Function”‘’&#039; text can be “Normal Text,” meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component name&#039;‘’ for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component value&#039;‘’ (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Symbol name&#039;‘’ for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039; &#039;‘&#039;Signal name’&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Pin name&#039;‘’ for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification date&#039;‘’ for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification time&#039;‘’ for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output date&#039;‘’ for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output time&#039;‘’ for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output scale&#039;‘’ for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Project name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;File name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page number&#039;‘’ for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Special property&#039;‘’ for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant&#039;‘’ for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component type&#039;‘’ for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page name&#039;‘’ for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Number&#039;‘’ for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Revision&#039;‘’ for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Signal Pages&#039;‘’ for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Component Usage’‘’ For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Version’‘’ For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Comment’‘’ For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Highest Page Number’‘’ For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_TextOptDlg.jpg|left]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
(special characters, characters, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click directly to access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [Apply] button inserts the corresponding character into the “Content” field of the text dialog. You can also double-click [[M11]] on a character at the bottom of the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ab der V34 können Sie auch Links ins Internet (URLs) oder Links zu lokalen Dateien im Intranet in Texte einfügen, die dann vom User durch Doppelklick geöffnet werden können:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links zu URLs oder zu Dateien&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Sie in ein Textelement einen Link einfügen, dann kann man später auf den Text doppelklicken ([[M11]]) und TARGET ruft die entsprechende Ressource über Windows auf. Wenn Sie einen solchen Text ändern wollen, selektieren Sie ihn bitte und tippen Sie die Taste [ä] zum Ändern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Möglich sind Dateipfade mit Laufwerksbuchstaben, z.B. &amp;quot;Z:\Verzeichnis\Datei.xyz&amp;quot; oder Dateipfade im UNC-Format: &amp;quot;\\server\verzeichnis\Datei.xyz&amp;quot; oder URLs für Internet-Aufrufe mit HTTP oder HTTPS: &amp;quot;&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de&amp;quot;. Der User wird dann noch gefragt, ob er den Link-Aufruf ausführen will. Ebenso wird darauf hingewiesen, dass es gefährlich sein kann in Schaltungen unbekannter Herkunft Links auszuführen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ein URL-Link wird an Windows weitergeleitet, welches dann den Standard-Internet-Browser öffnet und den Link anzeigt. Bei Links auf lokale Dateien wird die mit dem Dateityp verbundene Anwendung gestartet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ab der &#039;&#039;&#039;V34&#039;&#039;&#039; kann TARGET alle Dialoge skalieren. Wird in den Windows-Anzeigeneinstellungen eine Skalierung vorgenommen (z.B. für einen Monitor mit sehr hoher Auflösung), dann zeigt TARGET seine Oberfläche und die Dialoge von alleine vergrößert an. Die sind dann bequem zu bedienen und die Anzeige der eigentlichen Schaltung bleibt gestochen scharf.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bis V33 kann dieser Tipp hier helfen: Setzen Sie ggf einen Haken in den Eigenschaften der TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Have a look at the properties of the TarVxx.exe - check the box &amp;quot;Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29325</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29325"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T13:17:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; Windows fonts can be mirrored only with the Windows NT4/2000/XP 32-bit graphics. Windows 95/98/ME with its 16-bit graphics can&#039;t do this. The TARGET 3001! Gerber driver is not able to output Windows fonts. They are replaced by the font TARGET. Always check the result of this replacement please!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use ‘’&#039;“Position”‘’&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under ‘’&#039;“Content”‘’&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘’&#039;[multiline]‘’&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The ‘’&#039;[Windows]‘’&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The ‘’&#039;[Unicode]‘’&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’‘[A]‘’’ and ‘’‘[a]‘’’ buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The ‘’‘[A✓]‘’’ button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a ‘’&#039;font&#039;‘’. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows ‘borrows’ from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’&#039;“Font height”‘’&#039; and ‘’&#039;“-width”‘’&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the ‘’&#039;font size in pt (points)‘’&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’‘“stroke width”’‘’ is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (‘’‘Alignment’‘’ and ‘’‘Mirrored’‘’). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’&#039;“Fixed”‘’&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; ‘‘‘Right-aligned’’’ shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and ‘’‘Italic’‘’ makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Page’’’ determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘‘&#039;Layer’’&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Aura’‘’ represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the ‘’&#039;“Minimum Width”‘’&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘’&#039;“Function”‘’&#039; text can be “Normal Text,” meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component name&#039;‘’ for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component value&#039;‘’ (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Symbol name&#039;‘’ for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039; &#039;‘&#039;Signal name’&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Pin name&#039;‘’ for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification date&#039;‘’ for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification time&#039;‘’ for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output date&#039;‘’ for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output time&#039;‘’ for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output scale&#039;‘’ for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Project name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;File name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page number&#039;‘’ for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Special property&#039;‘’ for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant&#039;‘’ for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component type&#039;‘’ for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page name&#039;‘’ for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Number&#039;‘’ for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Revision&#039;‘’ for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Signal Pages&#039;‘’ for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Component Usage’‘’ For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Version’‘’ For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Comment’‘’ For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Highest Page Number’‘’ For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_TextOptDlg.jpg|left]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ab der V34 können Sie Tausende von Sonderzeichen und Zeichen fremder Sprachen in TARGET verwenden und in allen verfügbaren Formaten ausgeben. So sind praktisch alle Sprachfamilien der Welt vertreten, aber auch viele technische und kaufmännische Symbole bis hin zu Emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Sonderzeichen, Schriftzeichen, Piktogramme und Emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Duch einen Klick auf den Button [Unicode] können Sie den Dialog zur Auswahl von Unicode-Zeichen öffnen. Ganz oben können Sie einen Bereich von Zeichen in der Listbox auswählen. Die Schriftarten Arial, Times New Roman oder Segue UI halten eine große Menge an Zeichen für Sie bereit. Zeichen die in der eingestellten Schriftart nicht direkt vorhanden sind, werden durch ein ausgeklügeltes System oft automatisch mit Zeichen ersetzt, die in anderen Schriftarten zu finden sind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rechts sind mehrere Buttons mit Sammlungen von Sonderzeichen, die ihnen mit einem Klick interessante Unicode-Bereiche direkt ansteuern. Sie können auch im Internet nach Unicode Zeichen suchen und deren Code oben hexadezimal oder dezimal eingeben. Ein Klick auf den Button [Übernehmen] fügt das entsprechende Zeichen im Feld &amp;quot;Inhalt&amp;quot; des Text-Dialogs ein. Auch können Sie einen Doppelklick [[M11]] auf ein Zeichen unten in der Matrix der Zeichen machen, um es direkt einzufügen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ab der V34 können Sie auch Links ins Internet (URLs) oder Links zu lokalen Dateien im Intranet in Texte einfügen, die dann vom User durch Doppelklick geöffnet werden können:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links zu URLs oder zu Dateien&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Sie in ein Textelement einen Link einfügen, dann kann man später auf den Text doppelklicken ([[M11]]) und TARGET ruft die entsprechende Ressource über Windows auf. Wenn Sie einen solchen Text ändern wollen, selektieren Sie ihn bitte und tippen Sie die Taste [ä] zum Ändern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Möglich sind Dateipfade mit Laufwerksbuchstaben, z.B. &amp;quot;Z:\Verzeichnis\Datei.xyz&amp;quot; oder Dateipfade im UNC-Format: &amp;quot;\\server\verzeichnis\Datei.xyz&amp;quot; oder URLs für Internet-Aufrufe mit HTTP oder HTTPS: &amp;quot;&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de&amp;quot;. Der User wird dann noch gefragt, ob er den Link-Aufruf ausführen will. Ebenso wird darauf hingewiesen, dass es gefährlich sein kann in Schaltungen unbekannter Herkunft Links auszuführen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ein URL-Link wird an Windows weitergeleitet, welches dann den Standard-Internet-Browser öffnet und den Link anzeigt. Bei Links auf lokale Dateien wird die mit dem Dateityp verbundene Anwendung gestartet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ab der &#039;&#039;&#039;V34&#039;&#039;&#039; kann TARGET alle Dialoge skalieren. Wird in den Windows-Anzeigeneinstellungen eine Skalierung vorgenommen (z.B. für einen Monitor mit sehr hoher Auflösung), dann zeigt TARGET seine Oberfläche und die Dialoge von alleine vergrößert an. Die sind dann bequem zu bedienen und die Anzeige der eigentlichen Schaltung bleibt gestochen scharf.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bis V33 kann dieser Tipp hier helfen: Setzen Sie ggf einen Haken in den Eigenschaften der TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Have a look at the properties of the TarVxx.exe - check the box &amp;quot;Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=3D_view_of_the_front_panel_in_the_Internet_browser&amp;diff=29305</id>
		<title>3D view of the front panel in the Internet browser</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=3D_view_of_the_front_panel_in_the_Internet_browser&amp;diff=29305"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T11:53:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:Panel_13b.png]] Please click this icon in the [[Crash Course Frontpanel|Front Panel Toolbar]] or select the “View / 3D View” menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your web browser will open and, after a brief loading time, your front panel will appear on the screen. Use the [[M1H]] mouse button to rotate the panel and the [[M2H]] button to move it. You can zoom in and out using the mouse wheel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:FrontPanel3D.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Image 1: Front panel: blue eloxal-coated aluminium with a flat milled edge and threaded hole)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sink holes are also displayed, as well as images with a white background.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The view is intended to provide a realistic impression of the front panel before it is manufactured. We do not guarantee that the resulting 3D image will match the final front panel exactly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Vue 3D de la face avant dans le navigateur Internet]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:3D-Ansicht der Frontplatte im Internet-Browser]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=3D_view_of_the_front_panel_in_the_Internet_browser&amp;diff=29304</id>
		<title>3D view of the front panel in the Internet browser</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=3D_view_of_the_front_panel_in_the_Internet_browser&amp;diff=29304"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T11:53:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:Panel_13b.png]] Please click this icon in the [[Crash Course Frontpanel|Front Panel Toolbar]] or select the “View / 3D View” menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your web browser will open and, after a brief loading time, your front panel will appear on the screen. Use the [[M1H]] mouse button to rotate the panel and the [[M2H]] button to move it. You can zoom in and out using the mouse wheel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:FrontPanel3D.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Image 1: Front panel: blue eloxal-coated aluminium with a flat milled edge and threaded hole)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sink holes are also displayed, as well as images with a white background.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The view is intended to provide a realistic impression of the front panel before it is manufactured. We do not guarantee that the resulting 3D image will match the final front panel exactly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Vue 3D de la face avant dans le navigateur Internet]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:3D Ansicht der Frontplatte im Internet Browser]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=3D_view_of_the_front_panel_in_the_Internet_browser&amp;diff=29303</id>
		<title>3D view of the front panel in the Internet browser</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=3D_view_of_the_front_panel_in_the_Internet_browser&amp;diff=29303"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T11:51:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:Panel_13b.png]] Please click this icon in the [[Crash Course Frontpanel|Front Panel Toolbar]] or select the “View / 3D View” menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your web browser will open and, after a brief loading time, your front panel will appear on the screen. Use the [[M1H]] mouse button to rotate the panel and the [[M2H]] button to move it. You can zoom in and out using the mouse wheel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:FrontPanel3D.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Image 1: Front panel: blue eloxal-coated aluminium with a flat milled edge and threaded hole)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sink holes are also displayed, as well as images with a white background.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The view is intended to provide a realistic impression of the front panel before it is manufactured. We do not guarantee that the resulting 3D image will match the final front panel exactly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:3D view of the front panel in the Internet browser]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Vue 3D de la face avant dans le navigateur Internet]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Select_material_and_thickness_of_front_panel&amp;diff=29301</id>
		<title>Select material and thickness of front panel</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Select_material_and_thickness_of_front_panel&amp;diff=29301"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T11:26:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:MaterialAndThickness.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Image 1: Settings / Front panel)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the material and thickness of the front panel here. You can also specify a bevel around the edge of the front panel (chamfering).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The printing process typically assumes that the material is white or at least light in color. Therefore, the color white is not printed separately as a “background.” For a logo, for example, this is often desired because it appears to be printed transparently onto the material. If you would like a white rectangle to be printed behind the images or logos first, you can check the box here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Choisir le matériau et l&#039;épaisseur du face avant]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Material und Stärke der Frontplatte wählen]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Select_material_and_thickness_of_front_panel&amp;diff=29300</id>
		<title>Select material and thickness of front panel</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Select_material_and_thickness_of_front_panel&amp;diff=29300"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T11:25:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:MaterialAndThickness.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Image 1: Settings / Front panel)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the material and thickness of the front panel here. You can also specify a bevel around the edge of the front panel (chamfering).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The printing process typically assumes that the material is white or at least light in color. Therefore, the color white is not printed separately as a “background.” For a logo, for example, this is often desired because it appears to be printed transparently onto the material. If you would like a white rectangle to be printed behind the images or logos first, you can check the box here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Material und Stärke der Frontplatte wählen]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Choisir le matériau et l&#039;épaisseur du face avant]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Select_material_and_thickness_of_front_panel&amp;diff=29298</id>
		<title>Select material and thickness of front panel</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Select_material_and_thickness_of_front_panel&amp;diff=29298"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T11:21:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:MaterialAndThickness.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Image 1: Settings / Front panel)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the material and thickness of the front panel here. You can also specify a bevel around the edge of the front panel (chamfering).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The printing process typically assumes that the material is white or at least light in color. Therefore, the color white is not printed separately as a “background.” For a logo, for example, this is often desired because it appears to be printed transparently onto the material. If you would like a white rectangle to be printed behind the images or logos first, you can check the box here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:Select material and thickness of front panel]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Choisir le matériau et l&#039;épaisseur du face avant]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Select_material_and_thickness_of_front_panel&amp;diff=29297</id>
		<title>Select material and thickness of front panel</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Select_material_and_thickness_of_front_panel&amp;diff=29297"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T11:19:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:MaterialUndStaerke.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Image 1: Settings / Front panel)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the material and thickness of the front panel here. You can also specify a bevel around the edge of the front panel (chamfering).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The printing process typically assumes that the material is white or at least light in color. Therefore, the color white is not printed separately as a “background.” For a logo, for example, this is often desired because it appears to be printed transparently onto the material. If you would like a white rectangle to be printed behind the images or logos first, you can check the box here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:Select material and thickness of front panel]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Choisir le matériau et l&#039;épaisseur du face avant]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Crash_Course_Frontpanel&amp;diff=29296</id>
		<title>Crash Course Frontpanel</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Crash_Course_Frontpanel&amp;diff=29296"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T11:14:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:frontpanel1ikone.png|300px|right|link=//server.ibfriedrich.com/video/e/frontpanel/frontpanel1_e.mp4]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:frontpanel2ikone.png|300px|right|link=//server.ibfriedrich.com/video/e/frontpanel/frontpanel2_e.mp4]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:frontpanel3ikone.png|300px|right|link=//server.ibfriedrich.com/video/e/frontpanel/frontpanel3_e.mp4]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:panelpool_frontpanel2.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:moreExamples.png|right|link=http://www.panel-pool.com/fpuk/info_beispiele.html]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_1.png]]||[[Determine size of front panel]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_1a.png]]||[[Select material and thickness of front panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_2.png]]|| [[Set grid values]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_3.png]]||[[Insert a rectangular or oblong break-out]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_4.png]]||[[Insert a round, rectangular or oblong sink]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_5.png]]||[[Insert a D-form breakout]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_6.png]]||[[Insert elements from the library]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_7.png]]||[[Place a drill hole]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_8.png]]||[[Place a drill hole with a thread]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_9.png]]||[[Place a drill hole with a sink]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_10.png]]||[[Insert an imprinted text]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_11.png]]||[[Insert engraved text]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_12.png]]||[[Insert a scale]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_13.png]]||[[Insert a picture or logo]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_13b.png]]||[[3D-Ansicht der Frontplatte im Internet-Browser]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_14.png]]||[[Compute milling paths]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_15.png]]||[[Calculate and send order]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:faq41.jpg]]||[[Front panel questions|Frequently asked questions]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Please also have a look at:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Create and save a milling pattern]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Kurzeinführung Frontplatte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Crash Course Face Avant]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:First steps]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Select_material_and_thickness_of_front_panel&amp;diff=29295</id>
		<title>Select material and thickness of front panel</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Select_material_and_thickness_of_front_panel&amp;diff=29295"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T11:13:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: Created page with &amp;quot;Bild:MaterialUndStaerke.png&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; (Bild 1: Einstellungen / Frontplatte)   Wählen Sie hier das Material und die Stärke der Frontplatte aus. Ebenso können Sie eine umlaufende Fase am Umriss der Frontplatte festlegen (Kante brechen).  Der Druckvorgang geht normalerweise davon aus, dass auf ein weißes oder zumindest helles Material gedruckt wird. Daher wird die Farbe Weiß als &amp;quot;Hintergrund&amp;quot; nicht extra gedruckt. Bei einem Logo z.B. ist das auch oft erwünscht, weil es...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Bild:MaterialUndStaerke.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Bild 1: Einstellungen / Frontplatte)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wählen Sie hier das Material und die Stärke der Frontplatte aus. Ebenso können Sie eine umlaufende Fase am Umriss der Frontplatte festlegen (Kante brechen).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Der Druckvorgang geht normalerweise davon aus, dass auf ein weißes oder zumindest helles Material gedruckt wird. Daher wird die Farbe Weiß als &amp;quot;Hintergrund&amp;quot; nicht extra gedruckt. Bei einem Logo z.B. ist das auch oft erwünscht, weil es anscheinend wie transparent auf das Material gedruckt wird. Wenn Sie möchten, dass hinter den Bildern oder hinter den Logos zuerst ein weißes Rechteck gedruckt wird, dann können Sie hier ein Häkchen setzen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:Select material and thickness of front panel]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Choisir le matériau et l&#039;épaisseur du face avant]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Reference_symbols_with_pages&amp;diff=18028</id>
		<title>Reference symbols with pages</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Reference_symbols_with_pages&amp;diff=18028"/>
		<updated>2012-12-05T09:10:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:fromv16.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Reference symbols can show now on which pages further refs of the same signal are used:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ref_pages.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Here for instance a reference symbol &amp;quot;Clock&amp;quot; is shown on schematic page 1. Further reference symbol carrying the same signal appear on pages 4 and 8.&lt;br /&gt;
Double click [[M11]] the handle of a reference symbol. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Symbols&amp;quot; opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:sig_pages.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the button [Show signal pages]. The following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:sig_pages2.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Select [Yes]. While confirming the dialog &amp;quot;Change Symbols&amp;quot; the other pages are shown immediately.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Referenzsymbol mit Seitenangabe]][[Fr:Symboles de référence avec pages]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Playground&amp;diff=10814</id>
		<title>Playground</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Playground&amp;diff=10814"/>
		<updated>2008-08-19T09:31:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Judith Friedrich: /* header 2 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This is a playground for learning the Wiki Syntax. Please click on the tab &amp;quot;edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==header 1==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*enumeration 1&lt;br /&gt;
**enumeration 1.1&lt;br /&gt;
**enumeration 1.2&lt;br /&gt;
***enumeration 1.2.1&lt;br /&gt;
***enumeration 1.2.2&lt;br /&gt;
*enumeration 2&lt;br /&gt;
*enumeration 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==header 2==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That way you write &#039;&#039;italic&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;bold&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is a link to an [http://www.ibfriedrich.com external] page and that way cou link to a Wiki internal article &amp;quot;[[component]]&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a chart:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!column 1!!column 2!!column 3&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|cell 1a||cell 2a||cell 3a&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|cell 1b||cell 2b||cell 3b&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|cell 1c||cell 2c||cell 3c&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A new line is done by a break: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;amp;lt;br&amp;amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; A line feed by an additional break:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;amp;lt;br&amp;amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;br&amp;amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Have fun in the TARGET 3001! Wiki and... thanks for any contribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Hello.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a test of my editing of Wiki&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:About TARGET 3001! Wiki]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Spielwiese]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Aire de jeux]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Judith Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>